blob: 2c7d876e2a1ae522e8df3c2b9b59291790b33087 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200150#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800151
152/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400153 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
154 *
155 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100156 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400157 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400158 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200159 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
160 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400161 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100162 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300163 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200164 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400165 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700166struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200167 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100168 u16 cw_min;
169 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200170 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300171 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200172 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173};
174
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700175struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
176 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
178 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
179 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
180};
181
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100182/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200183 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
188 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200189 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190 */
191enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200196 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200197};
198
199/**
200 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
201 *
202 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
203 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
204 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100205 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200206 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200207 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
208 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
209 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
210 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100211 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100212 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200213 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
214 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
215 */
216struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100217 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200218 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200220 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
221
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100222 bool radar_enabled;
223
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100224 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225};
226
227/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300228 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
229 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
230 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
231 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
232 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
233 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
234 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
235 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
236 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
237 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
238 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
239 * for changes/removal.)
240 */
241enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
243 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
244};
245
246/**
247 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
248 *
249 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
250 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
251 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
252 * done.
253 *
254 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
255 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
256 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
257 */
258struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
261 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
262};
263
264/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100265 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
266 *
267 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
268 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
269 *
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
271 * also implies a change in the AID.
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300274 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700275 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
279 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
281 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
283 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300286 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
288 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100294 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200295 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
297 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100298 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
299 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
300 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100301 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200302 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303 */
304enum ieee80211_bss_change {
305 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300308 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
314 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300317 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300322 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200323 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300325 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100327 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200328 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200329
330 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100331};
332
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300333/*
334 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
335 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
336 * filtering will be disabled.
337 */
338#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
339
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100340/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200341 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
342 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200343 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300344 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300345 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
346 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
347 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700348 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200349enum ieee80211_event_type {
350 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200351 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300352 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300353 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200354};
355
356/**
357 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
359 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
360 */
361enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700362 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
363 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
364};
365
366/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200367 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200368 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
369 */
370struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
371 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
372};
373
374/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200375 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
376 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200377 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200378 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
379 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200380 */
381enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
382 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200383 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200384 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
385 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200386};
387
388/**
389 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
390 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
391 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
392 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
393 */
394enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
395 MLME_SUCCESS,
396 MLME_DENIED,
397 MLME_TIMEOUT,
398};
399
400/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200401 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200402 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
403 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
404 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
405 */
406struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
408 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
409 u16 reason;
410};
411
412/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300413 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
414 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
415 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300416 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300417 */
418struct ieee80211_ba_event {
419 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
420 u16 tid;
421 u16 ssn;
422};
423
424/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200425 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200426 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200428 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300429 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300430 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200431 */
432struct ieee80211_event {
433 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
434 union {
435 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200436 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300437 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200438 } u;
439};
440
441/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200442 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
443 *
444 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
445 *
446 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
447 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
448 */
449struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
450 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
451 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
452};
453
454/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100455 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
456 *
457 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
458 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
459 *
460 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200461 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
462 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530463 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100464 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
465 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200466 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
467 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100468 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200469 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300470 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200471 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100472 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
473 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
474 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
475 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200476 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200477 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
478 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200479 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100480 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
481 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200482 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
483 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
484 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700485 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800486 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200487 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
488 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
489 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300490 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100491 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200492 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
493 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100494 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
495 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200496 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100497 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300498 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
499 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
500 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200501 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200502 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
503 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
504 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200505 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300506 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
507 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
508 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
509 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100510 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
511 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
512 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200513 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200514 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
515 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
516 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300517 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
518 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200519 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300520 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
521 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200522 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100523 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
524 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
525 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
526 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
527 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
528 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100529 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200530 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
531 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
532 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100533 */
534struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200535 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100536 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200537 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530538 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100539 u16 aid;
540 /* erp related data */
541 bool use_cts_prot;
542 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300543 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200544 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800545 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700546 u16 beacon_int;
547 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200548 u64 sync_tsf;
549 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100550 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100551 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300552 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200553 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200554 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200555 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
556 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100557 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200558 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300559 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100560 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200561 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200562 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300563 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300564 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
565 size_t ssid_len;
566 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200567 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100568 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100569 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200570 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100571};
572
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800573/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200574 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800575 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700576 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800577 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100578 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200579 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
580 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
581 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
582 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
583 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
584 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
585 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
586 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
587 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
588 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
589 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200591 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
592 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200593 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200594 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200597 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200598 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
599 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
600 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
601 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
602 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
603 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
604 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
605 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200606 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
607 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
608 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300609 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
610 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
612 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
613 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600614 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
615 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
616 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100617 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
618 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
619 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200620 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
621 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200622 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
623 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100624 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
625 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
626 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
628 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
629 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
630 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100631 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
632 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
633 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100634 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
635 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
636 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200637 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
638 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
639 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200641 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
642 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100643 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
644 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
645 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
646 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200647 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
648 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
649 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530650 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
651 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
652 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200653 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
654 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
655 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200656 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
657 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530658 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
659 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
660 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
662 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
663 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530664 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
665 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
666 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
667 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
668 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200669 *
670 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
671 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800672 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200673enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
683 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
684 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
685 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600687 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200690 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200695 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200699 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530700 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200701 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530704 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200705};
706
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200707#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
708
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200709/**
710 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
711 *
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
713 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530714 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
715 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200718 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200719 *
720 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
721 */
722enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
723 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530724 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100725 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100726 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200727 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200728};
729
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200730/*
731 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
732 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
733 */
734#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
735 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
736 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
737 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
738 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100739 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200742
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530743/**
744 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
745 * Rate Control algorithm.
746 *
747 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
748 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
749 *
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
752 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
756 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530757 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
758 * Greenfield mode.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
761 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
762 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530763 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
764 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
765 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
767 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200768enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
769 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
770 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
771 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
772
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100773 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
777 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
778 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
780 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
781 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800782};
783
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200784
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200785/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
786#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200787
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200788/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
789#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
790
791/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200792#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200793
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200794/* maximum number of rate table entries */
795#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
796
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200797/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200798 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200799 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200800 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
801 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200802 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200803 *
804 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
805 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
806 *
807 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
808 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200809 *
810 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
811 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
812 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
813 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300814 * information::
815 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200816 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300817 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200818 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
819 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
820 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
821 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300822 * information should then contain::
823 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200824 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300825 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200826 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
827 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200828 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200829struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
830 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100831 u16 count:5,
832 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000833} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200834
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100835#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
836
837static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
838 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
839{
840 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200841 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
842 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100843}
844
845static inline u8
846ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
847{
848 return rate->idx & 0xF;
849}
850
851static inline u8
852ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
853{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200854 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100855}
856
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200857/**
858 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200859 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200860 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
861 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
862 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
863 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
864 *
865 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200866 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200867 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100868 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700869 * @control: union for control data
870 * @status: union for status data
871 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100872 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700873 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100874 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700875 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200876 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200877 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200878struct ieee80211_tx_info {
879 /* common information */
880 u32 flags;
881 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200882
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200883 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100884
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100885 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100886
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200887 union {
888 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200889 union {
890 /* rate control */
891 struct {
892 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
893 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
894 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200895 u8 use_rts:1;
896 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200897 u8 short_preamble:1;
898 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200899 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200900 };
901 /* only needed before rate control */
902 unsigned long jiffies;
903 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200904 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berg59862b02017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200905 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200906 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200907 u32 flags;
Johannes Berg59862b02017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200908 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200909 } control;
910 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200911 u64 cookie;
912 } ack;
913 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200914 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200915 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200916 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100917 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200918 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300919 u16 tx_time;
920 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200921 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200922 struct {
923 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
924 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200925 u8 pad[4];
926
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200927 void *rate_driver_data[
928 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
929 };
930 void *driver_data[
931 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200932 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700933};
934
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300935/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200936 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
937 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200938 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
939 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
940 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200941 *
942 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
943 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
944 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
945 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
946 */
947struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200948 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
949 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200950 const u8 *common_ies;
951 size_t common_ie_len;
952};
953
954
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200955static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
956{
957 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
958}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400959
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200960static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
961{
962 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
963}
964
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200965/**
966 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
967 *
968 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
969 *
970 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
971 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
972 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
973 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
974 *
975 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
976 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
977 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
978 */
979static inline void
980ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
981{
982 int i;
983
984 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
985 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
986 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
987 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
988 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
989 /* clear the rate counts */
990 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
991 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
992
993 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200994 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200995 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
996 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
997 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
998}
999
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001000
1001/**
1002 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1003 *
1004 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1005 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1006 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1007 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001008 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1009 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1010 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
1011 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1012 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001013 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1014 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1015 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1016 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001017 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1018 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001019 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1020 * the frame.
1021 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1022 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001023 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001024 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1025 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1026 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001027 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1028 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1029 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001030 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1031 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001032 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001033 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001034 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001035 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1036 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001037 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1038 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001039 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1040 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1041 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001042 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1043 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1044 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001045 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1046 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1047 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1048 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1049 * on this subframe
1050 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1051 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001052 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1053 * done by the hardware
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001054 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001055 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1056 * processing it in any regular way.
1057 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1058 * them for sniffing purposes.
1059 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1060 * monitor interfaces.
1061 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1062 * them for sniffing purposes.
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001063 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001064 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1065 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001066 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1067 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1068 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1069 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1070 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1071 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1072 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1073 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1074 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001075 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1076 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1077 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001078 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1079 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1080 * the first subframe.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001081 */
1082enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001083 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1084 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001085 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001086 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1087 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1088 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1089 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001090 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001091 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1092 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1093 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1094 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1095 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1096 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1097 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001098 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001099 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001100 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1101 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1102 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1103 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001104 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001105 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001106 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001107 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1108 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001109 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001110 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1111 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001112 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001113 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001114 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(32),
1115 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT_ULL(33),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001116};
1117
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001118#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1119
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001120/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001121 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1122 *
1123 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1124 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1125 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001126 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001127 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001128 */
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001129
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001130enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1131 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001132 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1133 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001134};
1135
1136/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001137 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1138 *
1139 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1140 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001141 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001142 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001143 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1144 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001145 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1146 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001147 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1148 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001149 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001150 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001151 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1152 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001153 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1154 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1155 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001156 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1157 * values were filled.
1158 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1159 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001160 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001161 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001162 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1163 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001164 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1165 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_\*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001166 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001167 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1168 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1169 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001170 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001171struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1172 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001173 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001174 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001175 u32 ampdu_reference;
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001176 u64 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001177 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001178 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001179 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001180 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001181 u8 rx_flags;
1182 u8 band;
1183 u8 antenna;
1184 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001185 u8 chains;
1186 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001187 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001188};
1189
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001190/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001191 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1192 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1193 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1194 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1195 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1196 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1197 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1198 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1199 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1200 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1201 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1202 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1203 * @data field.
1204 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1205 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1206 * length
1207 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1208 *
1209 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1210 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1211 * data.
1212 */
1213struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1214 u32 present;
1215 u8 align;
1216 u8 oui[3];
1217 u8 subns;
1218 u8 pad;
1219 u16 len;
1220 u8 data[];
1221} __packed;
1222
1223/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001224 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1225 *
1226 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1227 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001228 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1229 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1230 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001231 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1232 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1233 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1234 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1235 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1236 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1237 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001238 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1239 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1240 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1241 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1242 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001243 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1244 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001245 */
1246enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001247 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001248 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001249 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001250 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001251};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001252
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001253
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001254/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001255 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1256 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001257 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001258 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001259 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001260 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001261 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001262 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001263 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001264 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001265 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1266 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001267 */
1268enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001269 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001270 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001271 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001272 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001273 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1274 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1275 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001276 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001277};
1278
1279/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001280 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1281 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001282 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1283 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1284 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1285 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1286 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001287 */
1288enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1289 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1290 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1291 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1292 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1293
1294 /* keep last */
1295 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1296};
1297
1298/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001299 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1300 *
1301 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1302 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001303 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1304 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001305 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001306 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1307 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1308 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001309 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1310 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1311 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1312 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001313 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1314 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001315 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001316 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001317 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001318 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001319 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001320 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1321 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001322 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001323 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1324 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001325 *
1326 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1327 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001328 * configured for an HT channel.
1329 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1330 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001331 */
1332struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001333 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001334 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001335
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001336 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001337 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001338
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001339 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1340
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001341 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001342 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001343 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001344};
1345
1346/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001347 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1348 *
1349 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1350 * operation.
1351 *
1352 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1353 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1354 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1355 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001356 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1357 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001358 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1359 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001360 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001361 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1362 */
1363struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1364 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001365 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001366 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001367 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001368 u8 count;
1369};
1370
1371/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001372 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1373 *
1374 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1375 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001376 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1377 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1378 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1379 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001380 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1381 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1382 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1383 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001384 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1385 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1386 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001387 */
1388enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1389 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001390 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001391 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001392 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001393};
1394
1395/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001396 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1397 *
1398 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1399 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1400 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001401 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001402 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1403 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001404 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001405 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1406 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001407 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1408 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1409 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001410 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001411 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1412 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1413 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1414 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001415 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1416 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001417 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1418 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1419 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1420 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1421 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001422 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001423 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001424 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001425 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1426 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001427 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001428 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001429 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001430 */
1431struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001432 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001433 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001434 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001435 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001436 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001437 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001438
1439 u8 cab_queue;
1440 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1441
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001442 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1443
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001444 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1445
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001446 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001447
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001448#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1449 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1450#endif
1451
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001452 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1453
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001454 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001455 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001456};
1457
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001458static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1459{
1460#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001461 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001462#endif
1463 return false;
1464}
1465
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001466/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001467 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1468 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1469 *
1470 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1471 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1472 *
1473 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1474 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1475 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1476 */
1477struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1478
1479/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001480 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1481 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1482 *
1483 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1484 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1485 *
1486 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1487 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1488 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1489 */
1490struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1491
1492/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001493 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1494 *
1495 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1496 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1497 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001498 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1499 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001500 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1501 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001502 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1503 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1504 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001505 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1506 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001507 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001508 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1509 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001510 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001511 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001512 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001513 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1514 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1515 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001516 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1517 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1518 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1519 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1520 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1521 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1522 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001523 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001524 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001525 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001526 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1527 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1528 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001529 */
1530enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001531 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1532 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1533 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1534 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1535 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1536 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1537 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001538 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001539};
1540
1541/**
1542 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1543 *
1544 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1545 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1546 *
1547 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1548 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001549 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001550 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001551 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1552 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001553 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1554 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1555 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001556 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1557 * data block:
1558 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1559 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1560 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001561 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1562 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001563 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001564struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001565 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001566 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001567 u8 icv_len;
1568 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001569 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001570 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001571 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001572 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001573 u8 key[0];
1574};
1575
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001576#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1577
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001578#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1579#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1580
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001581/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001582 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1583 *
1584 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1585 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1586 * reverse order than in packet)
1587 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1588 * reverse order than in packet)
1589 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1590 * reverse order than in packet)
1591 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1592 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001593 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001594 */
1595struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1596 union {
1597 struct {
1598 u32 iv32;
1599 u16 iv16;
1600 } tkip;
1601 struct {
1602 u8 pn[6];
1603 } ccmp;
1604 struct {
1605 u8 pn[6];
1606 } aes_cmac;
1607 struct {
1608 u8 pn[6];
1609 } aes_gmac;
1610 struct {
1611 u8 pn[6];
1612 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001613 struct {
1614 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1615 u8 seq_len;
1616 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001617 };
1618};
1619
1620/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001621 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1622 *
1623 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1624 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1625 *
1626 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1627 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1628 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1629 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1630 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1631 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1632 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1633 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1634 * key_idx value calculation:
1635 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1636 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1637 */
1638struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1639 u32 cipher;
1640 u16 iftype;
1641 u8 hdr_len;
1642 u8 pn_len;
1643 u8 pn_off;
1644 u8 key_idx_off;
1645 u8 key_idx_mask;
1646 u8 key_idx_shift;
1647 u8 mic_len;
1648};
1649
1650/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001651 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1652 *
1653 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1654 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1655 *
1656 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1657 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1658 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001659enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001660 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001661};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001662
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001663/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001664 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1665 *
1666 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1667 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1668 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1669 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1670 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1671 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1672 */
1673enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1674 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1675 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1676 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1677 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1678 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1679 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1680};
1681
1682/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001683 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1684 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1685 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1686 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1687 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1688 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1689 *
1690 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1691 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1692 */
1693enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1694 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1695 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1696 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1697 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1698};
1699
1700/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001701 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1702 *
1703 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001704 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001705 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1706 */
1707struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1708 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1709 struct {
1710 s8 idx;
1711 u8 count;
1712 u8 count_cts;
1713 u8 count_rts;
1714 u16 flags;
1715 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1716};
1717
1718/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001719 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1720 *
1721 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1722 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1723 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1724 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1725 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001726 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001727 *
1728 * @addr: MAC address
1729 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001730 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001731 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1732 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001733 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1734 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1735 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001736 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1737 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001738 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001739 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001740 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1741 * if wme is supported.
1742 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001743 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001744 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1745 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1746 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1747 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001748 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001749 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001750 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001751 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1752 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301753 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001754 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1755 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1756 * unlimited.
1757 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. This
1758 * field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. For packets
1759 * with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1760 * + If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1761 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1762 * + If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1763 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1764 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level driver.
1765 * This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001766 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001767 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001768 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001769 */
1770struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001771 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001772 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1773 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001774 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001775 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001776 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001777 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001778 u8 uapsd_queues;
1779 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001780 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001781 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001782 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001783 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001784 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001785 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301786 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001787 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1788 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001789 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001790 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001791
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001792 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1793
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001794 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001795 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001796};
1797
1798/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001799 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1800 *
1801 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301802 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001803 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001804 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1805 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1806 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001807enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001808 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1809};
1810
1811/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001812 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1813 *
1814 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1815 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1816 */
1817struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1818 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1819};
1820
1821/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001822 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1823 *
1824 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1825 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1826 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1827 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001828 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001829 *
1830 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1831 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1832 */
1833struct ieee80211_txq {
1834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1835 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1836 u8 tid;
1837 u8 ac;
1838
1839 /* must be last */
1840 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1841};
1842
1843/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001844 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1845 *
1846 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1847 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1848 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1849 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1850 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1851 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001852 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1853 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1854 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1855 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1856 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1857 * algorithm.
1858 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1859 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1860 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1861 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1862 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1863 * CCK frames.
1864 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001865 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1866 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1867 * the FCS at the end.
1868 *
1869 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1870 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1871 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1872 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1873 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1874 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001875 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001876 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001877 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1878 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1879 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1880 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1881 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001882 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1883 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1884 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1885 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1886 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001887 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1888 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1889 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301890 *
1891 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1892 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001893 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001894 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1895 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1896 *
1897 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1898 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1899 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1900 *
1901 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1902 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001903 *
1904 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1905 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001906 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301907 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1908 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1909 * the stack.
1910 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001911 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001912 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1913 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001914 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001915 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1916 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1917 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001918 *
1919 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1920 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1921 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1922 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1923 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1924 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001925 *
1926 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1927 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1928 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1929 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1930 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1931 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001932 *
1933 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1934 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1935 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001936 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001937 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1938 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1939 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001940 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001941 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1942 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1943 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1944 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001945 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1946 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1947 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1948 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1949 * supported cipher suites.
1950 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001951 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1952 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1953 * for frames.
1954 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001955 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1956 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1957 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1958 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001959 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001960 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1961 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1962 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001963 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1964 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1965 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001966 *
1967 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1968 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001969 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001970 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1971 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1972 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1973 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001974 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1975 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1976 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1977 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001978 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001979 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1980 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1981 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001982 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001983 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001984 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001985 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1986 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1987 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001988 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
1989 * within A-MPDU.
1990 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001991 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
1992 * for sent beacons.
1993 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001994 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
1995 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
1996 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
1997 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
1998 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02001999 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2000 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2001 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2002 * timeout.
2003 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002004 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2005 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2006 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002007 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2008 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2009 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2010 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2011 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2012 *
2013 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2014 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2015 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302016 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2017 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2018 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2019 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2020 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002021 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002022 */
2023enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002024 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2025 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2026 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2027 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2028 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2029 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2030 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2031 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2032 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2033 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2034 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2035 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2036 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2037 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2038 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2039 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2040 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2041 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2042 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2043 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2044 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2045 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2046 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2047 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2048 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2049 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2050 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2051 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2052 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002053 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002054 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002055 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002056 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002057 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002058 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002059 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2060 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302061 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002062
2063 /* keep last, obviously */
2064 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002065};
2066
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002067/**
2068 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002069 *
2070 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2071 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2072 *
2073 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2074 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2075 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002076 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2077 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002078 *
2079 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2080 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002081 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2082 * along with this structure.
2083 *
2084 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2085 *
2086 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2087 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2088 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002089 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2090 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002091 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002092 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002093 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002094 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002095 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002096 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002097 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002098 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002099 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2100 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2101 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002102 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2103 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2104 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002105 *
2106 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2107 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002108 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2109 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002110 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2111 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002112 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2113 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002114 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002115 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2116 * can handle.
2117 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2118 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002119 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002120 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002121 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2122 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2123 * aggregation.
2124 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2125 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2126 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002127 *
2128 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002129 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2130 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2131 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2132 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002133 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002134 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2135 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2136 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002137 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2138 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002139 *
2140 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2141 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002142 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002143 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002144 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002145 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2146 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002147 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002148 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002149 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2150 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2151 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2152 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2153 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2154 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2155 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2156 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002157 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002158 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2159 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002160 *
2161 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2162 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2163 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2164 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2165 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2166 * neither enabled.
2167 *
2168 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2169 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2170 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002171 *
2172 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2173 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2174 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002175 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2176 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002177 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002178struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002179 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002180 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002181 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002182 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002183 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002184 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002185 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002186 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002187 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002188 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002189 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002190 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002191 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002192 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002193 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002194 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002195 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002196 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002197 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002198 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002199 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002200 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002201 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002202 struct {
2203 int units_pos;
2204 s16 accuracy;
2205 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002206 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002207 u8 uapsd_queues;
2208 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002209 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2210 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002211 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002212};
2213
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002214static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2215 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2216{
2217 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2218}
2219#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2220
2221static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2222 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2223{
2224 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2225}
2226#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2227
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002228/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002229 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2230 *
2231 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2232 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2233 */
2234struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2235 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2236
2237 /* Keep last */
2238 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2239};
2240
2241/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002242 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2243 *
2244 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2245 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2246 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2247 * @status: channel-switch response status
2248 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2249 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2250 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2251 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2252 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2253 */
2254struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2255 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2256 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2257 u8 action_code;
2258 u32 status;
2259 u32 timestamp;
2260 u16 switch_time;
2261 u16 switch_timeout;
2262 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2263 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2264};
2265
2266/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002267 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2268 *
2269 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2270 *
2271 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2272 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2273 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2274 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2275 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002276 *
2277 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002278 */
2279struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2280
2281/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002282 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2283 *
2284 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2285 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2286 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002287static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2288{
2289 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2290}
2291
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002292/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002293 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002294 *
2295 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2296 * @addr: the address to set
2297 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002298static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002299{
2300 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2301}
2302
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002303static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2304ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002305 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002306{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002307 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002308 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002309 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002310}
2311
2312static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2313ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002314 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002315{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002316 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002317 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002318 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002319}
2320
2321static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2322ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002323 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002324{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002325 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002326 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002327 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002328}
2329
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002330/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002331 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2332 * @hw: the hardware
2333 * @skb: the skb
2334 *
2335 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2336 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2337 */
2338void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2339
2340/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002341 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002342 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002343 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2344 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2345 *
2346 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2347 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002348 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2349 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2350 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002351 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2352 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2353 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002354 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2355 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2356 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2357 *
2358 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2359 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2360 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2361 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2362 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002363 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2364 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2365 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2366 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2367 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002368 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2369 *
2370 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2371 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2372 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2373 * based on the receive flags.
2374 *
2375 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2376 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2377 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2378 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002379 *
2380 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2381 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2382 * handler.
2383 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002384 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002385 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2386 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002387 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002388 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002389 *
2390 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2391 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2392 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002393 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002394
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002395/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002396 * DOC: Powersave support
2397 *
2398 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2399 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002400 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2401 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2402 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2403 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2404 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2405 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2406 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2407 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002408 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002409 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2410 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2411 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002412 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2413 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002414 *
2415 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2416 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2417 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002418 *
2419 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2420 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2421 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2422 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002423 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2424 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002425 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002426 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002427 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2428 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2429 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2430 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2431 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2432 * periods.
2433 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002434 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002435 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2436 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2437 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2438 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2439 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2440 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2441 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2442 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2443 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2444 *
2445 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002446 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002447 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002448 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2449 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2450 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2451 *
2452 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2453 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002454 */
2455
2456/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002457 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2458 *
2459 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002460 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002461 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2462 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2463 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2464 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2465 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2466 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002467 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2468 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002469 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2470 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2471 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2472 *
2473 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2474 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2475 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2476 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2477 *
2478 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2479 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2480 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2481 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002482 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002483 * - a list of information element IDs
2484 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2485 *
2486 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2487 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2488 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2489 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2490 * vendor information elements.
2491 *
2492 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2493 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2494 *
2495 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2496 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2497 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2498 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2499 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2500 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2501 *
2502 *
2503 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2504 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2505 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2506 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2507 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2508 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2509 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2510 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2511 *
2512 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2513 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2514 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002515 */
2516
2517/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002518 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2519 *
2520 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2521 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2522 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2523 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2524 *
2525 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2526 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2527 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2528 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2529 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2530 * hardware flags.
2531 *
2532 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2533 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2534 * turned off otherwise.
2535 *
2536 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2537 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2538 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2539 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2540 */
2541
2542/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002543 * DOC: Frame filtering
2544 *
2545 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2546 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2547 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2548 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2549 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2550 *
2551 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2552 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2553 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2554 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002555 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2556 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2557 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2558 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2559 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2560 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2561 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002562 *
2563 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2564 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2565 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2566 * or dropped.
2567 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002568 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2569 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2570 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2571 * the flag, but not clear it.
2572 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2573 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2574 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2575 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2576 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2577 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2578 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2579 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002580 */
2581
2582/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002583 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2584 *
2585 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2586 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2587 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2588 *
2589 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2590 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2591 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2592 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2593 * the driver code.
2594 *
2595 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2596 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2597 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2598 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2599 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2600 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2601 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2602 *
2603 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2604 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2605 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2606 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2607 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2608 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2609 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2610 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2611 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2612 * @sta_notify callback.
2613 *
2614 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2615 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2616 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2617 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2618 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2619 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2620 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002621 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002622 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2623 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2624 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2625 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2626 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2627 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2628 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002629 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2630 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2631 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002632 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2633 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2634 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2635 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2636 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2637 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2638 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2639 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2640 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2641 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2642 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2643 *
2644 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2645 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2646 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2647 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2648 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2649 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2650 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2651 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2652 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2653 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002654 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002655 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2656 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2657 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2658 *
2659 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2660 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2661 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2662 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2663 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002664 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002665 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2666 *
2667 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2668 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2669 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2670 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002671 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002672 *
2673 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2674 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2675 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2676 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002677 */
2678
2679/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002680 * DOC: HW queue control
2681 *
2682 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2683 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2684 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2685 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2686 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2687 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2688 *
2689 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2690 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2691 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2692 *
2693 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2694 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2695 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2696 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2697 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2698 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2699 * the hardware queue.
2700 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2701 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2702 *
2703 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2704 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2705 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2706 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2707 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2708 *
2709 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2710 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2711 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2712 * off-channel queue: 9
2713 *
2714 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2715 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2716 *
2717 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2718 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2719 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2720 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2721 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2722 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2723 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2724 *
2725 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2726 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2727 *
2728 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2729 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2730 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2731 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2732 */
2733
2734/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002735 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2736 *
2737 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2738 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2739 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2740 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2741 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002742 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2743 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2744 * multicast address.
2745 *
2746 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2747 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2748 *
2749 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2750 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2751 *
2752 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2753 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2754 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2755 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2756 * honour this flag if possible.
2757 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002758 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2759 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002760 *
2761 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002762 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002763 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002764 *
2765 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002766 */
2767enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002768 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2769 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2770 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2771 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2772 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2773 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002774 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002775 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002776};
2777
2778/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002779 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2780 *
2781 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2782 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002783 *
2784 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2785 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002786 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002787 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2788 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002789 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2790 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2791 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002792 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002793 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2794 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2795 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2796 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2797 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2798 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2799 * session is gone and removes the station.
2800 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2801 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2802 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2803 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002804 */
2805enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2806 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2807 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002808 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002809 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2810 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2811 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002812 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002813};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002814
2815/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002816 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2817 *
2818 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2819 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2820 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2821 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2822 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2823 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2824 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2825 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2826 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2827 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2828 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2829 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2830 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2831 */
2832struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2833 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2834 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2835 u16 tid;
2836 u16 ssn;
2837 u8 buf_size;
2838 bool amsdu;
2839 u16 timeout;
2840};
2841
2842/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002843 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2844 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002845 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2846 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002847 */
2848enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2849 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002850 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002851};
2852
2853/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002854 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2855 *
2856 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002857 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2858 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2859 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002860 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002861 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2862 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2863 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002864 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2865 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002866 */
2867enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2868 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2869 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002870 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002871 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002872};
2873
2874/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002875 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2876 *
2877 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2878 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2879 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2880 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2881 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2882 *
2883 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2884 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2885 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2886 */
2887enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2888 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2889 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2890};
2891
2892/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002893 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2894 *
2895 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2896 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2897 *
2898 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2899 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2900 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2901 * of wowlan configuration)
2902 */
2903enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2904 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2905 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2906};
2907
2908/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002909 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2910 *
2911 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2912 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2913 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2914 *
2915 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2916 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2917 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002918 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002919 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002920 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002921 *
2922 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2923 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2924 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2925 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2926 * or zero.
2927 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2928 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2929 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002930 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002931 *
2932 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2933 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2934 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2935 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002936 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2937 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002938 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002939 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002940 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2941 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2942 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2943 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2944 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002945 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2946 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2947 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2948 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002949 *
2950 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2951 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2952 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2953 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2954 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2955 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002956 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2957 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2958 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2959 * in suspend().
2960 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002961 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002962 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002963 * and @stop must be implemented.
2964 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2965 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2966 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2967 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2968 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002969 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002970 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002971 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2972 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2973 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2974 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2975 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2976 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002977 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2978 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2979 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2980 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2981 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2982 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2983 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002984 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002985 *
2986 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2987 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002988 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002989 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002990 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002991 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2992 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2993 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2994 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2995 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002996 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2997 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002998 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002999 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3000 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3001 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3002 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003003 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3004 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003005 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003006 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003007 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3008 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3009 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3010 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3011 * which flags are changed.
3012 * This callback can sleep.
3013 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003014 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003015 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003016 *
3017 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003018 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3019 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003020 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003021 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003022 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003023 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003024 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3025 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3026 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003027 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003028 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003029 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3030 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3031 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3032 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3033 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3034 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003035 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3036 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3037 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3038 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003039 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003040 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003041 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3042 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003043 * that power save is disabled.
3044 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3045 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3046 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3047 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3048 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3049 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3050 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003051 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003052 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003053 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3054 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3055 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3056 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3057 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3058 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3059 * The callback can sleep.
3060 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003061 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3062 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3063 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3064 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3065 *
3066 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003067 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003068 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003069 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3070 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003071 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3072 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3073 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003074 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003075 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3076 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3077 * this notification.
3078 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003079 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003080 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3081 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003082 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003083 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003084 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3085 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3086 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003087 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003088 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003089 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3090 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
3091 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
3092 * The callback can sleep.
3093 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003094 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003095 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003096 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003097 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3098 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3099 *
3100 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003101 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3102 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3103 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3104 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3105 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003106 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303107 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3108 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003109 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3110 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303111 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003112 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003113 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3114 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3115 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003116 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003117 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3118 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3119 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3120 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003121 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3122 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3123 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3124 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3125 * The callback can sleep.
3126 *
3127 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3128 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3129 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3130 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3131 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003132 * The callback can sleep.
3133 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003134 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3135 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3136 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3137 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3138 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3139 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3140 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003141 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3142 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3143 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003144 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003145 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3146 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3147 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3148 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3149 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3150 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3151 * The callback can sleep.
3152 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003153 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003154 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003155 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003156 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003157 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003158 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003159 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003160 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003161 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003162 *
3163 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003164 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003165 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003166 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003167 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003168 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3169 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3170 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3171 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3172 * The callback can sleep.
3173 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003174 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3175 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3176 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3177 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003178 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003179 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003180 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3181 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3182 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003183 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003184 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003185 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003186 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3187 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3188 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003189 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
Sara Sharonfad47182015-12-08 16:04:34 +02003190 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003191 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003192 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3193 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3194 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3195 * - TX: 1.....7
3196 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3197 * - TX: 8..1...
3198 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3199 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3200 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3201 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3202 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003203 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003204 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003205 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003206 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3207 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003208 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3209 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3210 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003211 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003212 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003213 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3214 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003215 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3216 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3217 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003218 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003219 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3220 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003221 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003222 *
3223 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003224 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3225 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3226 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3227 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003228 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003229 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003230 *
3231 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3232 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3233 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3234 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003235 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003236 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3237 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3238 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3239 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3240 *
3241 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003242 *
3243 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3244 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3245 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3246 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3247 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3248 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003249 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003250 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3251 * must be accepted in this case.
3252 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003253 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3254 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003255 *
3256 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3257 *
3258 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303259 *
3260 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3261 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303262 *
3263 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3264 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3265 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003266 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3267 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003268 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003269 *
3270 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3271 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3272 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3273 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003274 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003275 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3276 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3277 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3278 * more-data bit must always be set.
3279 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3280 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003281 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3282 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3283 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3284 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3285 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3286 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003287 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3288 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3289 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003290 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3291 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003292 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003293 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003294 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003295 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3296 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3297 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003298 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003299 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3300 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3301 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3302 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003303 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003304 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003305 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3306 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3307 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003308 *
3309 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3310 *
3311 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3312 *
3313 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3314 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3315 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003316 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3317 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3318 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3319 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3320 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3321 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3322 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3323 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3324 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3325 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3326 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3327 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003328 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003329 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3330 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3331 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3332 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3333 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3334 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3335 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3336 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3337 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003338 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303339 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003340 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303341 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003342 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3343 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3344 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303345 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003346 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3347 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303348 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003349 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3350 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303351 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003352 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3353 * another, as specified in the list of
3354 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3355 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303356 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003357 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003358 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3359 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3360 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3361 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3362 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3363 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3364 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003365 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003366 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3367 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3368 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3369 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3370 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003371 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003372 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3373 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3374 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003375 *
3376 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3377 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3378 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003379 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003380 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3381 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003382 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003383 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003384 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3385 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003386 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3387 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3388 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3389 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003390 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3391 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3392 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003393 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003394 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3395 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3396 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3397 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003398 *
3399 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3400 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3401 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003402 *
3403 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3404 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003405 *
3406 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3407 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3408 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3409 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3410 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3411 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3412 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3413 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3414 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003415 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3416 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3417 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3418 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3419 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3420 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3421 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003422 *
3423 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003424 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3425 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3426 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3427 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003428 *
3429 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3430 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003431 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3432 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3433 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3434 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3435 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3436 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003437 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3438 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3439 * this call.
3440 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3441 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3442 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003443 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003444struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003445 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3446 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3447 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003448 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003449 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003450#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3451 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3452 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003453 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003454#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003455 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003457 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3458 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003459 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003460 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003461 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003462 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003463 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3465 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3466 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003467
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003468 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3469 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3470
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003471 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003472 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003473 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3474 unsigned int changed_flags,
3475 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003476 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003477 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3479 unsigned int filter_flags,
3480 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003481 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3482 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003483 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003485 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003486 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3488 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3489 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3490 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003491 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3493 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003494 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003496 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003497 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003498 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003500 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3501 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3502 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003503 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003504 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003506 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3507 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3508 const u8 *mac_addr);
3509 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003511 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3512 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003513 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3514 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3515 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003516 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003517 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003518 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3519 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3520 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3521 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303522#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3523 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3524 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3525 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3526 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303527#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003528 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003529 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003530 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3531 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3532 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3533 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003534 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3535 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3536 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003537 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3539 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3540 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003541 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3542 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3543 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003544 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3545 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3546 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3547 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003548 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003549 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003550 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003551 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3552 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3553 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003554 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3555 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003556 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003557 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003558 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003559 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003560 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003561 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3562 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003563 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003564 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003565#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003566 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3567 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003568 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3569 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3570 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003571#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003572 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3573 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003574 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003575 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003576 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003577 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3578 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003579
3580 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003581 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003582 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003583 int duration,
3584 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003585 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003586 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3587 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3588 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303589 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303590 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3591 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003592 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3593 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3594 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003595
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003596 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3597 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3598 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3599 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3600 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003601 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3602 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3603 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3604 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3605 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003606
3607 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3608 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3609 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3610 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3611 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3612 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3613 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3614 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003615
3616 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3617 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003618
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003619 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3621
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003622 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3623 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3624 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3625 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3626 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3627 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3628 u32 changed);
3629 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3631 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3632 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3633 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3634 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003635 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3636 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3637 int n_vifs,
3638 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003639
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003640 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3641 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003642
3643#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3644 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3645 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3646 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3647#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003648 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3649 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3650 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003651 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3653 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003654
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003655 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3656 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3657
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003658 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3659 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003660 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3661 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003662 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3663 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003664
3665 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3666 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3667 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3668 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003669 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003670 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3671 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3672 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003673 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3674 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3675 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003676
3677 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3678 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003679 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003680
3681 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3682 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3683 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3684 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3685 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003686 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3688 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003689 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3691 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3692 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3694 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003695};
3696
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003697/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003698 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3699 *
3700 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3701 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3702 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3703 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3704 * @priv_data_len.
3705 *
3706 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3707 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3708 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3709 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3710 *
3711 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3712 */
3713struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3714 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3715 const char *requested_name);
3716
3717/**
3718 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003719 *
3720 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3721 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3722 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3723 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3724 * @priv_data_len.
3725 *
3726 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3727 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003728 *
3729 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003730 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003731static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003732struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003733 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3734{
3735 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3736}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003737
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003738/**
3739 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3740 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003741 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3742 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3743 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003744 *
3745 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003746 *
3747 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003748 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003749int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3750
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003751/**
3752 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3753 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3754 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3755 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3756 */
3757struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3758 int throughput;
3759 int blink_time;
3760};
3761
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003762/**
3763 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3764 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3765 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3766 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3767 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3768 */
3769enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3770 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3771 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3772 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3773};
3774
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003775#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003776const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3777const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3778const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3779const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3780const char *
3781__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3782 unsigned int flags,
3783 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3784 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003785#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003786/**
3787 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3788 *
3789 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3790 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3791 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3792 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3793 *
3794 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003795 *
3796 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003797 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003798static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003799{
3800#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3801 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3802#else
3803 return NULL;
3804#endif
3805}
3806
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003807/**
3808 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3809 *
3810 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3811 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3812 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3813 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3814 *
3815 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003816 *
3817 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003818 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003819static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003820{
3821#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3822 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3823#else
3824 return NULL;
3825#endif
3826}
3827
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003828/**
3829 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3830 *
3831 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3832 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3833 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3834 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3835 *
3836 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003837 *
3838 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003839 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003840static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003841{
3842#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3843 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3844#else
3845 return NULL;
3846#endif
3847}
3848
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003849/**
3850 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3851 *
3852 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3853 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3854 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3855 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3856 *
3857 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003858 *
3859 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003860 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003861static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003862{
3863#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3864 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3865#else
3866 return NULL;
3867#endif
3868}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003869
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003870/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003871 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3872 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003873 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003874 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3875 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3876 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003877 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3878 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3879 *
3880 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003881 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003882static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003883ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003884 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3885 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3886{
3887#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003888 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003889 blink_table_len);
3890#else
3891 return NULL;
3892#endif
3893}
3894
3895/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003896 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3897 *
3898 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3899 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3900 *
3901 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3902 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003903void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3904
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003905/**
3906 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3907 *
3908 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3909 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003910 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003911 *
3912 * @hw: the hardware to free
3913 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003914void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3915
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003916/**
3917 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3918 *
3919 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3920 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3921 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3922 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3923 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3924 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3925 *
3926 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3927 */
3928void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3929
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003930/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003931 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003932 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003933 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3934 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3935 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3936 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3937 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3938 *
3939 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3940 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3941 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3942 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3943 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3944 *
3945 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3946 *
3947 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003948 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003949 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3950 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003951 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003952void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3953 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003954
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003955/**
3956 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3957 *
3958 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003959 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3960 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3961 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3962 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003963 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003964 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003965 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3966 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003967 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3968 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003969 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003970 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003971 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003972 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3973 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003974 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003975static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3976{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003977 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003978}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003979
3980/**
3981 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3982 *
3983 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003984 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3985 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003986 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003987 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3988 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003989 *
3990 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3991 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003992 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003993void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003994
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003995/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003996 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3997 *
3998 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3999 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4000 *
4001 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004002 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4003 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004004 *
4005 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4006 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4007 */
4008static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009 struct sk_buff *skb)
4010{
4011 local_bh_disable();
4012 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4013 local_bh_enable();
4014}
4015
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004016/**
4017 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4018 *
4019 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4020 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4021 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4022 *
4023 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4024 *
4025 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4026 * each other.
4027 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004028 * @sta: currently connected sta
4029 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004030 *
4031 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004032 */
4033int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4034
4035/**
4036 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4037 * (in process context)
4038 *
4039 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4040 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4041 * applies.
4042 *
4043 * @sta: currently connected sta
4044 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004045 *
4046 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004047 */
4048static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4049 bool start)
4050{
4051 int ret;
4052
4053 local_bh_disable();
4054 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4055 local_bh_enable();
4056
4057 return ret;
4058}
4059
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004060/**
4061 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4062 * @sta: currently connected station
4063 *
4064 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4065 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4066 * connected station was received.
4067 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4068 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4069 * be serialized.
4070 */
4071void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4072
4073/**
4074 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4075 * @sta: currently connected station
4076 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4077 *
4078 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4079 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4080 * from a connected station was received.
4081 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4082 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4083 * serialized.
4084 */
4085void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4086
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004087/*
4088 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4089 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4090 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004091#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004092
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004093/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004094 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004095 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004096 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4097 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004098 *
4099 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004100 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4101 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004102 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004103 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4104 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4105 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4106 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4107 *
4108 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4109 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4110 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4111 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4112 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4113 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4114 *
4115 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4116 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4117 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4118 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4119 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004120 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004121void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4122 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004123
4124/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004125 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4126 *
4127 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4128 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4129 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4130 *
4131 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4132 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4133 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4134 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4135 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4136 */
4137void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4138 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4139 struct sk_buff *skb,
4140 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4141 int max_rates);
4142
4143/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004144 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4145 *
4146 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4147 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4148 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4149 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004150 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4151 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004152 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004153 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4154 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004155 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004156 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4157 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004158 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004159void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004160 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004161
4162/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004163 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4164 *
4165 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4166 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4167 * specific skbs.
4168 *
4169 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4170 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4171 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4172 *
4173 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4174 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4175 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4176 * @info: tx status information
4177 */
4178void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4179 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4180 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4181
4182/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004183 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4184 *
4185 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4186 *
4187 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4188 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4189 * for a single hardware.
4190 *
4191 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4192 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4193 */
4194static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4195 struct sk_buff *skb)
4196{
4197 local_bh_disable();
4198 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4199 local_bh_enable();
4200}
4201
4202/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004203 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004204 *
4205 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4206 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4207 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004208 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4209 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004210 *
4211 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4212 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004213 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004214void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004215 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004216
4217/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004218 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4219 *
4220 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4221 * connected STA.
4222 *
4223 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4224 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4225 */
4226void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4227
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004228#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4229
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004230/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004231 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4232 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4233 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004234 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4235 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4236 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004237 */
4238struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4239 u16 tim_offset;
4240 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004241
4242 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004243};
4244
4245/**
4246 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4247 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4248 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4249 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4250 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4251 *
4252 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4253 * obtain the beacon template.
4254 *
4255 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4256 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004257 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4258 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004259 *
4260 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4261 *
4262 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4263 */
4264struct sk_buff *
4265ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4266 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4267 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4268
4269/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004270 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4271 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004272 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004273 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4274 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4275 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4276 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4277 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4278 *
4279 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004280 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004281 *
4282 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4283 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004284 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4285 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004286 *
4287 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004288 *
4289 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004290 */
4291struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4292 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4293 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4294
4295/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004296 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4297 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004298 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004299 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004300 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004301 *
4302 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004303 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004304static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4305 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4306{
4307 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4308}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004309
4310/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004311 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4312 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4313 *
4314 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4315 * This function is called implicitly when
4316 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4317 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4318 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4319 *
4320 * Return: new csa counter value
4321 */
4322u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4323
4324/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004325 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4326 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4327 *
4328 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004329 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004330 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4331 */
4332void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4333
4334/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004335 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004336 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4337 *
4338 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4339 */
4340bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4341
4342
4343/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004344 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4345 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4346 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4347 *
4348 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4349 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4350 *
4351 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004352 *
4353 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004354 */
4355struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4356 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4357
4358/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004359 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4360 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4361 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4362 *
4363 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4364 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4365 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4366 *
4367 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4368 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004369 *
4370 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004371 */
4372struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4373 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4374
4375/**
4376 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4377 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4378 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4379 *
4380 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4381 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4382 * BSSID and address is used.
4383 *
4384 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4385 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004386 *
4387 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004388 */
4389struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4391
4392/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004393 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4394 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004395 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004396 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4397 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004398 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004399 *
4400 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4401 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004402 *
4403 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004404 */
4405struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004406 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004407 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004408 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004409
4410/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004411 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4412 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004413 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004414 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4415 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004416 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004417 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4418 *
4419 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4420 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4421 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4422 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4423 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004424void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004425 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004426 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004427 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4428
4429/**
4430 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4431 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004432 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004433 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004434 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004435 *
4436 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4437 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4438 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004439 *
4440 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004441 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004442__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4443 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004444 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004445
4446/**
4447 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4448 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004449 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004450 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4451 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004452 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004453 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4454 *
4455 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4456 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4457 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4458 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4459 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004460void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4461 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004462 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004463 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004464 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4465
4466/**
4467 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4468 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004469 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004470 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004471 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004472 *
4473 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4474 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4475 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004476 *
4477 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004478 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004479__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4480 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004481 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004482 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004483
4484/**
4485 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4486 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004487 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004488 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004489 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004490 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004491 *
4492 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4493 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004494 *
4495 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004496 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004497__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4498 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004499 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004500 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004501 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004502
4503/**
4504 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4505 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004506 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004507 *
4508 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4509 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4510 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4511 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004512 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4513 *
4514 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4515 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004516 *
4517 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4518 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4519 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4520 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4521 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4522 * use common code for all beacons.
4523 */
4524struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004525ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004526
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004527/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004528 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4529 *
4530 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4531 *
4532 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4533 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4534 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4535 */
4536void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4537 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4538
4539/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004540 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004541 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004542 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4543 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004544 *
4545 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004546 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4547 * with this P1K
4548 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004549 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004550static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4551 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4552{
4553 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4554 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4555 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4556
4557 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4558}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004559
4560/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004561 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4562 *
4563 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4564 * and transmitter address.
4565 *
4566 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4567 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4568 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4569 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4570 */
4571void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4572 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4573
4574/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004575 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4576 *
4577 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4578 * in the packet.
4579 *
4580 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4581 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4582 * encrypted with this key
4583 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4584 */
4585void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4586 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004587
4588/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004589 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4590 *
4591 * @pos: start of crypto header
4592 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4593 * @pn: PN to add
4594 *
4595 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4596 * the packet payload)
4597 *
4598 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4599 * point to the crypto header)
4600 */
4601u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4602
4603/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004604 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4605 *
4606 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004607 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004608 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4609 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4610 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4611 *
4612 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4613 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4614 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4615 *
4616 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4617 * can be done concurrently.
4618 */
4619void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4620 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4621
4622/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004623 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4624 *
4625 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004626 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004627 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4628 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4629 * @seq: new sequence data
4630 *
4631 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4632 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4633 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4634 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4635 *
4636 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4637 * can be done concurrently.
4638 */
4639void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4640 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4641
4642/**
4643 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4644 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4645 *
4646 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4647 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4648 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4649 *
4650 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4651 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4652 */
4653void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4654
4655/**
4656 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4657 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4658 * @keyconf: new key data
4659 *
4660 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4661 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4662 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4663 *
4664 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4665 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4666 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4667 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4668 *
4669 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4670 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4671 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4672 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4673 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4674 * of the reconfiguration.
4675 *
4676 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4677 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4678 *
4679 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4680 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4681 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4682 * the key that's being replaced.
4683 */
4684struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4685ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4686 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4687
4688/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004689 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4690 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4691 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4692 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4693 * @gfp: allocation flags
4694 */
4695void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4696 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4697
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004698/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004699 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4700 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4701 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4702 *
4703 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4704 */
4705void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4706
4707/**
4708 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4709 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4710 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4711 *
4712 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4713 */
4714void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4715
4716/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004717 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4718 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4719 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4720 *
4721 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004722 *
4723 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004724 */
4725
4726int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4727
4728/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004729 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4730 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4731 *
4732 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4733 */
4734void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4735
4736/**
4737 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4738 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4739 *
4740 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4741 */
4742void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4743
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004744/**
4745 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4746 *
4747 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4748 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004749 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4750 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004751 *
4752 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004753 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004754 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004755void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4756 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004757
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004758/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004759 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4760 *
4761 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4762 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4763 *
4764 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4765 */
4766void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4767
4768/**
4769 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4770 *
4771 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4772 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4773 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4774 * while associating, for instance.
4775 *
4776 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4777 */
4778void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4779
4780/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004781 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4782 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4783 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4784 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4785 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4786 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4787 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4788 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004789 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004790 */
4791enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4792 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4793 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004794 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004795};
4796
4797/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004798 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4799 *
4800 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4801 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4802 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4803 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4804 *
4805 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4806 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4807 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4808 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4809 */
4810void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4811 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4813 void *data);
4814
4815/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004816 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004817 *
4818 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4819 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004820 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4821 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4822 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004823 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004824 *
4825 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004826 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004827 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004828 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4829 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004830static inline void
4831ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4832 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4833 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4834 void *data)
4835{
4836 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4837 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4838 iterator, data);
4839}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004840
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004841/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004842 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4843 *
4844 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4845 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4846 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4847 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004848 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004849 *
4850 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004851 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004852 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4853 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4854 */
4855void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004856 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004857 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4858 u8 *mac,
4859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4860 void *data);
4861
4862/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004863 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4864 *
4865 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4866 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4867 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4868 *
4869 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4870 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4871 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4872 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4873 */
4874void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4875 u32 iter_flags,
4876 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4877 u8 *mac,
4878 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4879 void *data);
4880
4881/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004882 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4883 *
4884 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4885 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4886 * function for them.
4887 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4888 *
4889 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4890 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4891 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4892 */
4893void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4894 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4895 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4896 void *data);
4897/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004898 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4899 *
4900 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4901 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4902 *
4903 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4904 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4905 */
4906void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4907
4908/**
4909 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4910 *
4911 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4912 * workqueue.
4913 *
4914 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4915 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4916 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4917 */
4918void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4919 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4920 unsigned long delay);
4921
4922/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004923 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004924 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004925 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304926 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004927 *
4928 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004929 *
4930 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4931 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4932 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4933 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304934int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4935 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004936
4937/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004938 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004939 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004940 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4941 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4942 *
4943 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004944 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4945 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004946 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004947void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004948 u16 tid);
4949
4950/**
4951 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004952 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004953 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004954 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004955 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004956 *
4957 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4958 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4959 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4960 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004961int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004962
4963/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004964 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004965 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004966 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4967 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4968 *
4969 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004970 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4971 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004972 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004973void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004974 u16 tid);
4975
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004976/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004977 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4978 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004979 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004980 * @addr: station's address
4981 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004982 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4983 *
4984 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004985 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4986 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004987struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004988 const u8 *addr);
4989
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004990/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004991 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004992 *
4993 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004994 * @addr: remote station's address
4995 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004996 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004997 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4998 *
4999 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005000 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5001 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005002 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5003 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5004 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5005 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5006 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5007 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5008 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005009 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005010 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005011 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005012struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5013 const u8 *addr,
5014 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005015
5016/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005017 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5018 * @hw: the hardware
5019 * @pubsta: the station
5020 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5021 *
5022 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5023 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5024 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5025 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5026 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5027 *
5028 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5029 * manner.
5030 *
5031 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5032 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5033 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5034 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5035 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5036 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5037 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5038 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5039 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5040 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5041 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5042 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5043 * woke up while blocked or not.
5044 */
5045void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5046 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5047
5048/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005049 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5050 * @pubsta: the station
5051 *
5052 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5053 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5054 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5055 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5056 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005057 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5058 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5059 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5060 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5061 *
5062 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5063 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5064 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5065 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005066 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005067void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005068
5069/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005070 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5071 * @pubsta: the station
5072 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5073 *
5074 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5075 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5076 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5077 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5078 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5079 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5080 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5081 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5082 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5083 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5084 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5085 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5086 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5087 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5088 */
5089void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5090
5091/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005092 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5093 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5094 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5095 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5096 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5097 *
5098 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5099 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5100 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5101 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5102 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5103 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005104 *
5105 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5106 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5107 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005108 */
5109void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5110 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5111 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5112 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5113 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5114 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5115 void *data),
5116 void *iter_data);
5117
5118/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005119 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5120 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5121 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5122 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5123 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5124 *
5125 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5126 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5127 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5128 * in removal process will be skipped.
5129 *
5130 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5131 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5132 */
5133void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5135 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5136 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5137 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5138 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5139 void *data),
5140 void *iter_data);
5141
5142/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005143 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5144 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5145 * @iter: iterator function
5146 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5147 *
5148 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5149 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5150 * places while calling into the driver.
5151 *
5152 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5153 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5154 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005155 *
5156 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5157 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5158 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5159 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005160 */
5161void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5162 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5163 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5164 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5165 void *data),
5166 void *iter_data);
5167
5168/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005169 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5170 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5171 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5172 *
5173 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5174 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5175 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5176 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5177 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005178 * %NULL.
5179 *
5180 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005181 */
5182struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5183 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5184
5185/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005186 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5187 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005188 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005189 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005190 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005191 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005192 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5193 */
5194void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005195
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005196/**
5197 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5198 *
5199 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5200 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005201 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005202 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5203 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005204 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5205 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005206 *
5207 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5208 * without connection recovery attempts.
5209 */
5210void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5211
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005212/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005213 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5214 *
5215 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5216 *
5217 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5218 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5219 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5220 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5221 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5222 *
5223 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5224 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5225 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5226 * disconnect normally later.
5227 *
5228 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5229 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5230 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5231 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5232 */
5233void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5234
5235/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005236 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5237 * rssi threshold triggered
5238 *
5239 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5240 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5241 * @gfp: context flags
5242 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005243 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005244 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5245 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5246 */
5247void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5248 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5249 gfp_t gfp);
5250
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005251/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005252 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5253 *
5254 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5255 * @gfp: context flags
5256 */
5257void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5258
5259/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005260 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5261 *
5262 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5263 */
5264void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5265
5266/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005267 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5268 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5269 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5270 *
5271 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5272 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5273 */
5274void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5275
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005276/**
5277 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5278 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005279 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005280 *
5281 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5282 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5283 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5284 */
5285void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5286 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5287
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005288/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005289 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5290 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5291 */
5292void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5293
5294/**
5295 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5296 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5297 */
5298void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5299
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005300/**
5301 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5302 *
5303 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5304 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5305 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5306 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5307 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5308 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5309 *
5310 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5311 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5312 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5313 */
5314void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5315 const u8 *addr);
5316
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005317/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005318 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5319 * @pubsta: station struct
5320 * @tid: the session's TID
5321 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5322 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5323 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5324 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5325 *
5326 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5327 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5328 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5329 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5330 */
5331void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5332 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5333 u16 received_mpdus);
5334
5335/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005336 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5337 *
5338 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5339 * buffer.
5340 *
5341 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5342 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5343 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5344 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5345 */
5346void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5347
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005348/**
5349 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5350 *
5351 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5352 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5353 * reordering.
5354 *
5355 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5356 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5357 *
5358 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5359 * @addr: station mac address
5360 * @tid: the rx tid
5361 */
5362void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5363 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5364
5365/**
5366 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5367 *
5368 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5369 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5370 * reordering.
5371 *
5372 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5373 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5374 *
5375 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5376 * @addr: station mac address
5377 * @tid: the rx tid
5378 */
5379void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5380 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5381
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005382/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005383
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005384/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005385 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005386 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005387 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5388 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5389 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005390 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5391 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005392 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5393 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5394 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5395 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5396 * RTS threshold
5397 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5398 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005399 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005400 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5401 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005402 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005403 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005404 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005405 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005406struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5407 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5408 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5409 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5410 struct sk_buff *skb;
5411 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5412 bool rts, short_preamble;
5413 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005414 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005415 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005416 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005417};
5418
5419struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005420 const char *name;
5421 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005422 void (*free)(void *priv);
5423
5424 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5425 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005426 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005427 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305428 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005429 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005430 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5431 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005432 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5433 void *priv_sta);
5434
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005435 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5436 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5437 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5438 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005439 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5440 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5441 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005442 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5443 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005444
5445 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5446 struct dentry *dir);
5447 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005448
5449 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005450};
5451
5452static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005453 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005454 int index)
5455{
5456 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5457}
5458
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005459/**
5460 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5461 *
5462 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5463 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5464 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5465 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5466 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5467 * not null.
5468 *
5469 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5470 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5471 *
5472 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5473 * that this may be null.
5474 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5475 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5476 */
5477bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5478 void *priv_sta,
5479 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5480
5481
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005482static inline s8
5483rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5484 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5485{
5486 int i;
5487
5488 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5489 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5490 return i;
5491
5492 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005493 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005494
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005495 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005496 return 0;
5497}
5498
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005499static inline
5500bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5501 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5502{
5503 unsigned int i;
5504
5505 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5506 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5507 return true;
5508 return false;
5509}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005510
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005511/**
5512 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5513 *
5514 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5515 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5516 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5517 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5518 *
5519 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5520 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5521 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5522 */
5523int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5524 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5525 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5526
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005527int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5528void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005529
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005530static inline bool
5531conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5532{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005533 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005534}
5535
5536static inline bool
5537conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5538{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005539 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5540 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005541}
5542
5543static inline bool
5544conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5545{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005546 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5547 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005548}
5549
5550static inline bool
5551conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5552{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005553 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005554}
5555
5556static inline bool
5557conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5558{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005559 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5560 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5561 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005562}
5563
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005564static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5565ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5566{
5567 if (p2p) {
5568 switch (type) {
5569 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5570 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5571 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5572 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5573 default:
5574 break;
5575 }
5576 }
5577 return type;
5578}
5579
5580static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5581ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5582{
5583 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5584}
5585
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005586/**
5587 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5588 *
5589 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5590 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5591 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5592 *
5593 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5594 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5595 * matching GroupId management frame.
5596 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5597 */
5598void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5599 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5600
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005601void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5602 int rssi_min_thold,
5603 int rssi_max_thold);
5604
5605void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005606
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005607/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005608 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005609 *
5610 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5611 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005612 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5613 *
5614 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5615 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005616 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005617int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5618
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005619/**
5620 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5621 * @vif: virtual interface
5622 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5623 * @gfp: allocation flags
5624 *
5625 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5626 */
5627void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5628 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5629 gfp_t gfp);
5630
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005631/**
5632 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5633 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5634 * @vif: virtual interface
5635 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5636 * @band: the band to transmit on
5637 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5638 *
5639 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5640 */
5641bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5642 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5643 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5644
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005645/**
5646 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5647 *
5648 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5649 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5650 *
5651 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5652 *
5653 * private:
5654 *
5655 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5656 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5657 */
5658struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5659 u32 next_tsf;
5660 bool has_next_tsf;
5661
5662 u8 absent;
5663
5664 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5665 struct {
5666 u32 start;
5667 u32 duration;
5668 u32 interval;
5669 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5670};
5671
5672/**
5673 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5674 *
5675 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5676 * @data: NoA tracking data
5677 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5678 *
5679 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5680 */
5681int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5682 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5683
5684/**
5685 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5686 *
5687 * @data: NoA tracking data
5688 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5689 */
5690void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5691
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005692/**
5693 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5694 * @vif: virtual interface
5695 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5696 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5697 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5698 * @gfp: allocation flags
5699 *
5700 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5701 */
5702void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5703 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5704 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005705
5706/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005707 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5708 *
5709 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5710 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5711 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5712 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5713 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5714 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5715 *
5716 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5717 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5718 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5719 *
5720 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5721 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5722 *
5723 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5724 */
5725int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5726
5727/**
5728 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5729 *
5730 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5731 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5732 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5733 *
5734 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5735 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5736 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5737 *
5738 * @sta: the station
5739 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5740 */
5741void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5742
5743/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005744 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5745 *
5746 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5747 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5748 *
5749 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5750 */
5751struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5752 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e32016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005753
5754/**
5755 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5756 *
5757 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5758 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5759 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5760 *
5761 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5762 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5763 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5764 */
5765void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5766 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5767 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005768
5769/**
5770 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5771 *
5772 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5773 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5774 *
5775 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5776 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5777 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5778 * @gfp: allocation flags
5779 */
5780void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5781 u8 inst_id,
5782 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5783 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005784
5785/**
5786 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5787 *
5788 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5789 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5790 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5791 *
5792 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5793 * @match: match event information
5794 * @gfp: allocation flags
5795 */
5796void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5797 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5798 gfp_t gfp);
5799
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005800#endif /* MAC80211_H */